Yamaha RX-V1075 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V1075

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

PREPARATIONS 14

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 41

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

PLAYBACK 49

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

En 3

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

CONFIGURATIONS 87

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 112

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 114

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

En 4

APPENDIX 123

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Accessories En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region

of purchase.

 CD-ROM

(Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”

and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.135

Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker

system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows

you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.41

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.53

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.57

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.20

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.61

•USB

. p.65

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.68

• Internet radio

. p.71

•AirPlay

. p.73

3D and 4K signals supported

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.50

Control

Audio/Video

(via HDMI/MHL)

Smartphone/Tablet

Control

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.31)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Easy operation and wireless music

playback from iPhone or Android device

By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the

Yamaha website for details.

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.53)

Connecting front presence speakers allows you to

create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own

room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence

speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker

(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound.

❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.57)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays

back the selected source with the least circuitry, which

lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

❑ Easy operation with a TV screen

You can navigate through different types of content

(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or

easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.

❑ Low power consumption

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption (p.112).

BD/DVD

player

Game

console

Camcorder

Set-top box

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.86).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.101).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.104).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to use the supplied remote control to operate

external devices…

devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.117).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.116). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.122).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.87)

• SCENE settings (p.90)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.93)

• Various function settings (p.96)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.113)

• System settings (p.114)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.104)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.105)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.106)

• An iPod is being charged (p.61)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.10).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.57).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.9).

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

52 3 41

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.83).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.82).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.84).

Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2

(p.81).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.56).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.52).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.50).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2 Enables/disables the audio output to

Zone2 (p.80).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)

that is controlled by the keys and knobs

on the front panel (p.80).

H INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.82).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.59).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.58).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.59).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.58).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.65) or an iPod

(p.61).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.34, 35) or a smartphone (p.35).

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

SCENE

1234

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

INFO

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

9 A C D H I KE J LB0

M N O

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

3 ZONE2

Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.80).

4 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

5 PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.81)

6 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.82).

7 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

8 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

9 ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.84) is working.

0 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57) is

working.

A CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.53) is working. “CINEMA

DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) is activated.

B Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

C Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

Z Front presence speaker (L)

X Front presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBL SBRSB

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED PARTY

0 BCB

4 53

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.33).

2 DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

3 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.37).

4 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.31).

5 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.37).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(composite video/S-video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or

S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting

to a Zone2 video monitor (p.77).

7 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.78).

9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.32).

0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.31).

A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(component video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a Zone2

video monitor (p.77).

B REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.79).

C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.38).

D RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

75Ω

ANTENNA

(4 RADIO)

21 3 7 8 D5 6 CA B9:4

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12

E ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36).

F AUDIO 1–4 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.33).

G MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel

output and inputting audio signals (p.38).

H ZONE OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.77).

I PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or

to an external power amplifier (p.24).

J SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.15).

K AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

G J KFE H I

75Ω

ANTENNA

(4 RADIO)

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE key

Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.118).

This key lights up in green after pressed.

RECEIVER key

Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.118). This key

lights up in orange after pressed.

RECEIVER z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

TUNER FM/AM radio

4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch

Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by

the remote control (p.80).

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.50).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.52).

7 External device operation keys

Select menus for external devices (p.118).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.63).

A Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.58).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you play back and perform other operations for external

devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is

selected (p.118).

B Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.52).

C INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.82).

D SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.59).

F TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.117).

G HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.49).

H PA RT Y k e y

Turns on/off the party mode (p.81).

I VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

J MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

K OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.83).

L DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.82).

M CODE SET key

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the

remote control (p.117).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.117).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

6 87

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.15)

Basic speaker configuration (p.16)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.20)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.26)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.31)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

5 Connecting to a network (p.37)

Connect the unit to a network.

6 Connecting other devices (p.37)

Connect external devices such as recording devices.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.39)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language

(p.40)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.41)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20).

Functions of each speaker

• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.

However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.53).

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also

produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround

back (L)

Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.

Surround

back (R)

Front

presence (L)

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP

3D (p.53), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional

sound field in your room.

Front

presence (R)

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces

bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the

unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 7.1+2-channel system

(using both surround back and front presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.53).

❑ 7.1-channel system

(using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural

3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying

5.1-channel contents.

❑ Front 5.1-channel system

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front

presence speakers (*2).

If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence

speakers (*4).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.24).

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.98)

7+2 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●

Center 3 ●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●*3

Surround (R) 5 ●●*3

Surround

back (L)

6 ● *1

Surround

back (R)

7 ● *1

Front

presence (L)

E ● *2 *4

Front

presence (R)

R ● *2 *4

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

–

UC U

ZONE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2

ROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

FRONT

Audio pin cable

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi

amplifier, etc.) to build an

extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21

■ Available speaker configurations

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.98) in

the “Setup” menu.

❑ 5ch BI-AMP

Main zone

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign

(p.98)

Page

Output

channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External

power

amplifier

(required)

5  5ch BI-AMP 21

7 

Surround

back

5ch BI-AMP +SB 22

7 +1 (Zone2) 7ch +1ZONE 22

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 (not used)

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22

❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE

Bi-amp

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Main zone

Zone2

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.80), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.98) in the

“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.

■ Connecting Zone2 speakers

When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting (p.98) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.77).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

2 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

3 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

4 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 )

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

HDMI

3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

1 2 34

The unit (rear)

4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

PB PR

ONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S2000)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 25

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

❑ HDMI/MHL jack

Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL

cable.

• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both

HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on

your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an

HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an

HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL

connection” (p.35).

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ S VIDEO jack

Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)

and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video

cable.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

MHL cable

COMPONEN

AV 1

Component video cable

S-video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks

available on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

■

Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.104) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.134).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).

2 Connecting a TV

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback

devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the

unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.135).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a

TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Does your TV support

Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Does your TV support

HDMI Control?

Does your TV have an

HDMI input jack?

■ Connection Method 3 (p.29)

■ Connection Method 2 (p.28)

■ Connection Method 1 (p.26)

■ Connection Method 4 (p.30)

Yes

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT 1 jack

HDMI input

(ARC-compatible)

The unit (rear)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)

and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

c Press ON SCREEN.

d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

h Press ON SCREEN.

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu is set

to “On”.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio

cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

PLA

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 28

■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.104) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.134).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and

playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

PLA

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 29

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.134).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 30

■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following

connections.

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

V OUT

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

S VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.49).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for

Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.78).

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.61)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.65)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.109) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,

D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.86) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/D

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

3 Connecting playback devices

OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIG

B PR

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

R L R RL L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

12V

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

1 2

TV connection

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ S-video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZON

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

S-video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(4 RADIO)

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(S VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(S-video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 33

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.109) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL

(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.86) in the “Option” menu.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(4 RADIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 34

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.61) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.65).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the

video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from

the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in

“Video Out” (p.88) in the “Input” menu.

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 35

❑ MHL connection

Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an

MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the

mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input

videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).

• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.

• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.

• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and

numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the

mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.

• If “Standby Through” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio

to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby

mode.

• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.

– The unit is turned on.

– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a

video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable).

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX

(VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL

IN) jack.

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

MHL

Mobile device

MHL output

The unit (front)

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

V RL

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 36

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling the AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SU

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4

FM/AM antenna connections

5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 37

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.105).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.113) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Connecting recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output video/audio signals selected as the input.

• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

5 Connecting to a network

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV

YPB PR

B PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

L R

(4 RADIO)

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

6 Connecting other devices

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

AV OUT

The unit (rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video/audio

recording device

1 2 3 4 5

Network connections

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 38

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output

You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an

SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,

the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using

“Video Out” (p.88) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.

• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing

speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker

configuration.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are

not available.

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.110) in the

“Setup” menu.

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB P

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

The unit (rear)

MULTI CH

INPUT jacks

Channel output

(Center)

Device with analog

multi-channel output

(Subwoofer)

(Surround

back)

(Surround)

(Front)

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT

EMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System connection

input

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

1 2 3 4 5 6

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 39

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

7 Connecting the power cable

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT

EMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Power cable connection

8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 40

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Language setting

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

B NE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that

the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function

at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

According to your speaker configuration, configure

the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.98) in the

“Setup” menu.

For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic”

(default).

For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set

to the appropriate setting.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position (same height as your ears) and connect it

to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at

your listening position (same height

as your ears). We recommend the

use of a tripod as a microphone

stand. You can use the tripod

screws to stabilize the microphone.

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

B NE

RECEIVER z

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, change the measuring method

(multi/single).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate

external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.44)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.43)

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different

positions in the room. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit the area defined by those positions

(multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RECEIVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process (about 3 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48).

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.45).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.45).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the

correct polarity (+/-).

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 46

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.95).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 47

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 48

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.45) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.45) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80

ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the

subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as

possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 49

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)

• Playing back iPod music (p.61)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.65)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.68)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.71)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.73)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.84).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.50).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108)), you

can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

OUT1+2

HDMIOUTSel.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 50

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.89).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)

Input

Input (p.49) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.86) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.49) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

Sound Program (p.52) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.102) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.57) Off On On On

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 51

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.118) to register it.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.90) in the “Scene” menu.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.91) in the “Scene” menu.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SETComplete

SCENE1

Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround

Video Video Mode

Vol ume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

R. DE

SCENE

SOURCE

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 52

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.54).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.55).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.56).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.56).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.57).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.57).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press

ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “Sound Program” menu (p.92).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the

straight decode mode (p.56) is automatically selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.112).

Selecting the sound mode

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

P-

MEN

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

B NE

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 53

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize

Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you

to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert

halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.84) in the

“Option” menu to “Off”.

• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full

effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence

speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using

the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and

7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit

utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce

up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We

recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more

effective stereoscopic sound field.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel

speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

HallinVienna

CLASSICAL

MUSIC

“CINEMA DSP n” lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 54

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 55

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 56

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.85) in the “Option” menu to a

setting other than “Off”.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.131).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

STRAIGHT

bPro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

bPLIIx Movie

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

SUR.DECODE

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

B NE

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus

– Using the multi-zone function

– Output from the AV OUT jacks

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.85) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PUREDIRECT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

EnhancerOn

“ENHANCER” lights up

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

B NE

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 58

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in Australia model.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.86) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

ENHAN

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

TUNING

BAND

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 59

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

“Auto Preset” (p.60).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.58)

to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.60).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PresetOK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

Preset number

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

02:Empty

Preset

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 60

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

2 Band icon

Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

MULT

MAIN

SCEN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOURC

EIVE

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 61

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)

is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite

AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To

select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.63).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playing back iPod music

Made for.

iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation)

iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad

(as of April 2013)

OPTION

SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILEN

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 62

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.63).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.64) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 63

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.64) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

s Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

MODE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 64

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 65

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage

device for more information.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC

files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer

of the USB storage device.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

• The unit does not support a USB hub.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use

extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

OPTION

SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILEN

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

USB storage device

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 66

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.67) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 67

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.67) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 68

You can play back music files stored on your PC or

DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router

(p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)

are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.113) in the “Information” menu.

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing

and allow media to be shared with the device.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and

configure the media sharing settings.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 69

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.70) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q /w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 70

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.70) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.89).

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 71

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.113) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Listening to Internet radio

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 72

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by

selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the

following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need

the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal

account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.113)

in the “Information” menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to

stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control s Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 73

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on

the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same

router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP

address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.113) in the “Information”

menu.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music

contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or

display the playback screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon

( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are

connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and

select the unit (network name of the unit) as the

audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and

starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac

with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of April 2013)

iTunes

Router

Playback starts

iPod

Starts playback

on iTunes

or iPod

The unit

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 74

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.88) in the “Input” menu

to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 75

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input

sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in

another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main

zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in another room

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.77

• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources

can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you

need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of the unit.

■ Enjoying videos/music in another room

You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.77

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.77

• Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network

sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in

Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog video/audio jacks of the unit.

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you

connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.135).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone

configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best

meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Video

(ZONE OUT)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 76

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Connection

TV: p.78

• Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of

an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of

the unit.

Preparing Zone2

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection

method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or

an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker

cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23).

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Video/audio

(HDMI)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers or an external amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or

come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit

or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will

appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 77

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in

Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to

the external amplifier.

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back

analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2.

Depending on the video input jacks available on your video

monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2

video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video

monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the

video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player

via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR

OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video

monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu to

“Zone2”.

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

YPB PR

YPB

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZON

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKER

SURROUND BSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R

FRONT

AUDIO

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2) jacks

Zone2

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CESURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(any of COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO, S VIDEO)

Zone2

Main zone

Video input

(any of component video,

composite video, S-video)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 78

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to

play back videos/audio

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back

videos/audio at Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can

enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone2).

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the

video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.31).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected

to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI

OUT2 Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

TWORK

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

YPB PR YPB

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

XIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTE

SUBWOOF

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2

Main zone

HDMI input

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

(Example: using an AV amplifier)

Zone2

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the

following operations is performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 79

■ Operating the unit from Zone2

(remote connection)

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the

supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal

receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.117).

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using

Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit

does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

B PR

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2

ONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FR

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

R L R RL

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Zone2

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 80

Controlling Zone2

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Press RECEIVER z.

Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.

When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front

display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you

connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.135).

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the

main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)

• Playing back iPod music (p.61)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.65)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.68)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.71)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.73)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the web control

to control Zone2. For details on the web control function, refer to

“Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the

main zone.

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

R. DE

MAIN/ZONE2

RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 81

■ Other operations for Zone2

The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.

Adjusting the volume

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display.

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

• When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the

following functions are not available.

– Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance

– Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music

that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,

stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this

function when you want to use main zone music as background

music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.108) in

the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).

• If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2

output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

SCENE

PARTY

PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 82

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–4

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

AudioDecoder

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

AV1

Information

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

INFO

DISPLAY

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 83

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ToneControl

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

Adaptive DRC

(Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 84

Dialogue Adjust

(Dialog Adjust)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 84

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 84

Extended Surround

(EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources

when surround back speakers are used.

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 85

Subwoofer

Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 85

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 85

Video Mode

(Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

Audio Select

(Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than

one audio connection is made for one input source.

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.64),

USB storage device (p.67), or media server (p.70).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.64),

USB storage device (p.67), or media server (p.70).

—

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 84

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to

playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a

high volume.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).

Settings

■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you

can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

0 to 3

Default

❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming

from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence

speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.53) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Default

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Ideal position

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 85

■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround

back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing

back those sources.

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.57).

Settings

Default

TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

■ Video Mode (Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in “Processing” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

Auto (Auto)

(default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

(bPLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off (Off)

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit

reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Direct (Direct)

(default)

Disables the video signal processing.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 86

■ Audio Select (Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for

one input source.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Auto (Auto) (default)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt

(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or

OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Stereo (Stereo)

(default)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 87

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 88

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 88

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 88

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 88

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Input sources

TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Default

USB: V-AUX

Others: Off

Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited (default)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Off Does not output video.

AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 89

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.50) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 90

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.51).

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

❑ Device Control

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to

the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI

Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.135).

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 90

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 91

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 91

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 91

❑ Detail

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with

low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and

include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.50) for the selected scene.

Input Input (p.49), Audio Select (p.86)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.49)

Mode Sound Program (p.52), Pure Direct Mode (p.102), Enhancer (p.57)

Sound Tone Control (p.84), Adaptive DRC (p.84)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.84), Dialogue Lift (p.84), Dialogue Level

(p.84), Subwoofer Trim (p.85), Extended Surround (p.85)

Video Video Mode (p.103)

Volume Master Volume (p.49)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.101), Delay (p.102)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.98), PEQ Select (p.100)

Check or uncheck

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 92

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (Sound Program menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 93

Sound Program menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

■ Settings for sound programs

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie

(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx

Music* (bPLII Music*),

bPLIIx Game* (bPLII

Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,

Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1 ms to 49 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0ms to 250ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto (default), Off

7ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the right and left

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the front

presence speakers.

0 to 10 (default: 5)

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

front presence speakers do

not produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off (default), On

Item Function Settings

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 94

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off (default), On

Select “On” to wrap front right/left

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 7 (default: 3)

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to +3 (default: 0)

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 95

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 96

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 41

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 98

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 98

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 98

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 98

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 99

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 99

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 99

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 99

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 99

Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 100

Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 100

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 100

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 100

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 100

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 101

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 101

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 101

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 102

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 102

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 102

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 102

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 102

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 102

Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 103

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 104

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 104

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 105

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 97

Network

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 105

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 106

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 106

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 106

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 107

Zone2 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 107

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 107

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 107

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 108

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 108

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 108

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 108

HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 108

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 108

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 109

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 109

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 109

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 109

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 110

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 110

DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 110

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 111

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 111

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 112

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 112

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 98

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1 (default), Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2

subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

❑ Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic (default)

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone

and Zone2 speakers (p.22).

5ch BI-AMP

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including

bi-amp front speakers) (p.21).

5ch BI-AMP +SB

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including

bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using

an external amplifier (p.22).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 99

❑ Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

❑ Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

❑ Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

❑ Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.

Settings

❑ Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Small x2 (default)

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Use

Normal

(default)

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not

reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front

speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 100

❑ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.

❑ Bass Cross Over

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker

whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be

produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Default

3.00 m (10.0 ft)

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel

low-frequency components.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 101

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

❑ Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4

Settings

❑ Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV

connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto (default)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 102

❑ Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Default

0 ms

• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.57).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off (default)

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max

Volume”.)

Auto (default)

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from

the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with

the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,

the wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On (default)

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 103

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

❑ Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.115) in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on

your TV normally.)

❑ Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or

2160p (4K) signals.

Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 104

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.135).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.135) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

❑ TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–4

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting

an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

❑ ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to

“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

❑ Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit

when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108) is set to “Main”.

❑ Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to

the unit.

Settings

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby

Sync”.

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto (default)

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 105

❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection

keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby

mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

❑ DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 106

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

❑ Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

❑ MAC Address 1–10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 107

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set

Configures the Zone2 settings.

❑ Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable

volume adjustments for Zone2.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.98) is set to “7ch +1ZONE.

❑ Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

❑ Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Off (default)

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108

❑ Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

Settings

❑ Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone

Set” (p.107).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,

S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.135).

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.81).

Choice

Target: Zone2

Settings

Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable (default)

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

❑ Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.112) is set to “On”.

❑ Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

❑ Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Picture 1 (default),

Picture 2, Picture 3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

❑ Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching

when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

❑ Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ DC OUT

Configures the DC OUT jack setting.

❑ Power Mode

Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT

jack.

Settings

Power (default)

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High (default)

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

All (default)

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Continuous (default)

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of

the power state (on/standby) of the unit.

Main Zone Power

Sync.

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is

turned on.

(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for

the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

Off (default) Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 112

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off (default) Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English (default) English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 113

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.122).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.106)

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.115)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.115)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.114)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume for Zone2

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 114

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 114

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 115

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 115

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 115

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 115

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

116

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 116

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 116

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 116

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8  MIN (default)

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 115

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press CODE SET on the remote control.

Press RECEIVER.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.

• The registered remote control codes (p.117) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

Canada model: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.103) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ON

REMOTESENSOR

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ID1

REMOTECONAMP

YES (default)

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

NTSC

TVFORMAT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

YES

MONITORCHECK

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 116

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.122).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.113) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

USB

FIRMUPDATE

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

x.xx

VERSION

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 117

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other

ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the

registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register

the codes again.

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection

keys (p.118). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

• (China model only)

You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.119).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.

If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z Turns on/off the TV.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 118

Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

• (China model only)

You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.119).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find the remote control code for your playback

device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press the input selection key.

For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for

the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Configuring scene assignments” (p.51).

■ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in

orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For

example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER

and the external device after pressing SOURCE.

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected

song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.117).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

REE

PTI

MUTE

RAM

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

CODE SET

DISPLAY

SOURCE z

SOURCE

RECEIVER

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

Menu operation keys

External device

operation keys

Input selection keys

External device

operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 119

Programming from other remote controls

(learning)

(China model only)

The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals

from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control

operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your

playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work

after you register the remote control code, use the learning function

to assign a function to each key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys depending on the

type of your device.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is

connected).

For TV: press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.

Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls

at each other.

Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.

a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to

assign a function.

For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,

external device operation keys

For TV: TV operation keys

b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is

learned.

Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.

Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are

learned.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks once.

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

USB NET

Remote control of external device

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart

Note

• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external

receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or

numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If

you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following

steps.

a Press CODE SET.

b Press RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

MUTE

RAM

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE z

SOURCE

TV operation keys

Menu operation keys

External device

operation keys

External device

operation keys

Numeric keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 120

Clearing functions learned from other

remote controls

(China model only)

■ Clearing the assignment for each key

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.

Press the key that you want to reset.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.

Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are

cleared.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks once.

■ Clearing the assignments for each input

source

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

EIVE

R. DE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE

Numeric keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 121

Resetting remote control codes

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input

selection key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press the input selection key.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

To reset the remote control to factory default settings

a Press CODE SET.

b Press RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

CODE SET

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Numeric keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 122

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.116).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.113). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the

wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.116).

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 123

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.98).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.102). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 (p.107).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.102). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 (p.107).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.85).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.135). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.109) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.111).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.115).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu

to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when

this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 124

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.19).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.111).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.114).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.19).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.112).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 125

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.115).

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights

up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.117). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be

controlled using the remote control.

A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to

V-AUX.

Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.121).

The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.

The remote control does not learn new functions.

(China model only)

The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external

device are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.119).

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not

compatible with the remote control.

Learning is impossible in this case.

Memory capacity is full.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions

(p.120).

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 126

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.113).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.102).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.113).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.101).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.98).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.100).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.85).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.100).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”

(p.99).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.104).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 127

Video

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.104).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.104). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.113). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.112).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI

audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due

to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.78).

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.115).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.113). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.137).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26 to 29).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 128

FM/AM radio

The video is interrupted.

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you

are using (p.49).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.78).

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.86).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.58).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.58).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.59).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 129

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.105). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.105).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.68).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.106).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.68).

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.106).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.116).

APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 130

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.68).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.61).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

MHL Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile

device.

Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.115).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.115).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.68). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 131

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 132

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

MHL

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission

that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL

complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C

signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color

reproduction than the composite video signal system.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 133

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D

sound field in your room.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 134

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

S VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

m: Available

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

SVIDEO

out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmm m

1080i mmmm m

1080p m

S VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmm m

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

S VIDEO outS VIDEO in

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 135

Multi-zone output

■ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected

■ Video output

m: Available

*3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.31).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.50)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.118)

Using the unit’s

internal amplifier (p.23)

Using an external amplifier (p.77)

Zone2 Out

EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

USB (including iPod) mm

Network sources mm

TUNER mm

Zone2 Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)

jack (*4)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO

HDMI video m

Component video m

S-video m

Composite video m

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 136

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.104) in the “Setup”

menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and

“Standby Sync”).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 137

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 138

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 139

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory

standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United

States and/or other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network

Windows

™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™

Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

Trademarks

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 140

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)

Component x 4 (AV 1–4)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)

* V-AUX: MHL input compatible

•Others

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R

, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)

- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)

- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)

• Digital Audio

Optical x 1 (AV OUT)

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

- Component x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)

* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

• DC OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

MHL

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Specifications

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 141

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R .............................................................110 W+110 W

Center............................................................................. 110 W

Surround L/R.......................................................110 W+110 W

Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R .............................................................120 W+120 W

Center............................................................................. 120 W

Surround L/R.......................................................120 W+120 W

Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch

Center ........................................................................135 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8



)

[China model]

Front L/R.....................................................................165 W/ch

Center.........................................................................165 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k

HEADPHONE OUT.............................................150 mV/100 

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ................................+0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .........................................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less

MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 )

............................................................................ 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)

[Canada and China models].............................. 86 dB or more

[Australia model]................................................ 81 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)

......................................................................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out)..................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

.................................................................60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz

Zone2

Bass Boost/Cut ............................ ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 142

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[Canada model]............................................................... NTSC

[Other models].................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 

S-video

Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

C (NTSC) [Canada model] .......................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 

C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75 

Component

Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 

• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[Canada model]...................................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ......................................................... 72 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.3%/0.5%

• Antenna Input ................................................75  unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[Canada model]....................................... 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[Canada model] ..............................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[Canada model] ................................................. 400 W/510 VA

[Other models] ................................................................490 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ........... 0.3 W (Typical)

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 4.5 W (Typical)

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)

..........................................................................4.5 W (Typical)

Network Standby On .........................................2.2 W (Typical)

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

..................... 435 x 182 x 430 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 16-7/8”)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Weight ...........................................................15.1 kg (33.3 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 143

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 122

Lock icon (o) 111

Numerics

16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 103

2.1-channel system 17

2ch Stereo (sound program) 55

3.1-channel system 17

4K signal (video signal resolution) 137

5.1-channel system 17

5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 98

5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21

5ch BI-AMP +SB

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 98

5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22

7.1+2-channel system 16

7.1-channel system 16

7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 98

7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22

7ch Stereo (sound program) 55

Access denied (error indication) 130

Access error (error indication) 130

Action Game (sound program) 54

Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 84

Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 102

Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 102

ADVANCED SETUP menu 114

Advanced speaker configuration 20

Adventure (sound program) 54

AirPlay 73

AM antenna connection 36

AM radio listening 58

Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 104

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26

ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 104

Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 103

Audio Decoder (front display information) 82

Audio device connection 33

Audio file format (PC/NAS) 68

Audio file format (USB storage device) 65

AUDIO jack 25

Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 104

Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26

Audio Select (Option menu) 86

Audio Signal (Information menu) 113

Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 111

Auto Preset (FM radio) 60

Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41

Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 101

Automatic speaker setting optimization 41

Automatic station preset (FM radio) 60

AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 111

AV OUT jack 11

Backup/recovery of the settings 116

Banana plug 19

Basic playback operation 49

Basic speaker configuration 16

Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 84

Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 100

Bi-amp speaker connection 23

Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Bitstream 137

CAT-5 cable 37

Cellar Club (sound program) 55

Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 99

Center Image (Sound Program menu) 94

Center Width (Sound Program menu) 94

Chamber (sound program) 55

Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Check SP Wires (error indication) 130

Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 47

CINEMA DSP 3D 53

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 84

CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 55

Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 60

Clearing (remote control) 120

COAXIAL jack 25

Component video cable 25

Component video connection (video device) 32

COMPONENT VIDEO jack 25

Composite video connection (video device) 33

Compressed Music Enhancer 57

Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 98

Crossover frequency setting 100

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41

DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 110

DC OUT jack 11

Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 93

Decoder Mode (Input menu) 88

Decoder Off (front display information) 82

Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 105

Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 113

Default setting restoration 116

Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 101

Detail (Load, Scene menu) 91

Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 90

DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 105

Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 84

Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 84

Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 84

Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 84

Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 84

Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 84

Dialogue normalization level 113

Index

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 144

Digital coaxial cable 25

Digital Media Controller (DMC) 89

Digital optical cable 25

Dimension (Sound Program menu) 94

Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 109

Direct (Sound Program menu) 93

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 131

DISPLAY key 13

Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 109

Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 100

Distance (YPAO measurement result) 45

DLNA 68

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 89

DMC Control (Input menu) 89

DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 105

DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 113

Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 85

Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 85

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 85

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 56

Drama (sound program) 54

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 131

DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 93

DSP Program (front display information) 82

DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 56

DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 56

DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 85

Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 102

ECO (Setup menu) 111

ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 112

Enhancer (Option menu) 85

ENHANCER (sound mode) 57

ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 54

Error indication (front display) 130

EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 85

EXTD Surround (Option menu) 85

Extended Surround (Option menu) 85

External device control (remote control) 117

External device operation key (remote control) 13

External power amplifier 24

, 77

Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 100

Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 106

FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 116

Firmware update 116

Firmware update (network) 116

, 122

Firmware update (USB) 116

Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 113

Firmware version check 116

FM antenna connection 36

FM Mode (Option menu) 86

FM radio listening 58

FM/AM radio tuning 58

Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Frequency (FM/AM radio) 58

Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 98

Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 93

Front display (part names and functions) 10

Front display brightness 109

Front display information 82

Front panel (part names and functions) 8

Front panel door (front panel) 8

Front panel jack connection 34

Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 99

Function (Setup menu) 109

GND terminal 34

Ground lead 34

Hall in Munich (sound program) 55

Hall in Vienna (sound program) 55

HDMI (Setup menu) 104

HDMI cable 25

HDMI connection (video device) 31

HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 104

HDMI jack 25

HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 113

HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 105

HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 105

HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 108

HDMI output selection 49

HDMI signal compatibility 137

Headphones 53

Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 93

High definition audio 137

High speed HDMI cable 25

In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 85

Indicator (part names and functions) 10

INFO key 9

, 13

Information display (front display) 10

Information menu 112

Information switching (front display) 82

Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 93

Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 102

Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 107

INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 116

Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 109

Input jack assignment 109

Input menu 87

Input selection key (remote control) 13

Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 85

Internal Error (error indication) 130

Internal Error (YPAO error message) 47

Internet radio listening 71

IP Address (Network, Information menu) 113

IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 105

iPod charge 61

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 145

iPod connection 61

iPod content playback 62

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 73

iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 73

Language (Setup menu) 112

Learning (remote control) 119

Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 93

Level (Sound Program menu) 93

Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 100

Level (YPAO measurement result) 45

Level Error (YPAO warning message) 48

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 132

Lipsync 132

Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 101

LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 55

Liveness (Sound Program menu) 93

Load (Scene menu) 90

Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 132

MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 106

MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 113

MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 106

Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 107

Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 98

Manual speaker configuration 98

Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 59

Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 102

Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 107

Measurement result (YPAO) 45

Media sharing setup 68

Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 111

Menu language selection 40

Menu operation key (front panel) 9

Menu operation key (remote control) 13

MHL cable 25

MHL connection 35

MHL jack 25

MHL Overloaded (error indication) 130

MHL-compatible mobile device 35

MODE key 13

Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 93

Monaural reception (FM radio) 58

Monitor check 115

MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 115

Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 108

Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 108

Mono Movie (sound program) 54

MOVIE (sound program category) 54

MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 54

MULTI CH INPUT jack 12

Multi measurement (YPAO) 44

Multi Zone (Information menu) 113

Multi Zone (Setup menu) 107

Multi-channel analog connection 38

Multiple room playback 75

Multi-zone 75

Multi-zone output 135

MUSIC (sound program category) 55

Music Video (sound program) 54

MUTE key 13

Muting 49

NAS (Network Attached Storage) 37

NAS connection 37

NAS content playback 68

Network (Information menu) 113

Network (Setup menu) 105

Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37

Network cable 37

Network connection 37

Network information 113

Network Name (Network, Information menu) 113

Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 106

Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 106

No content (error indication) 130

No device (error indication) 130

No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 47

No Front SP (YPAO error message) 47

No MIC (YPAO error message) 47

No Signal (YPAO error message) 47

No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 47

Noisy (YPAO error message) 47

Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45

NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 115

Numeric key (remote control) 13

ON SCREEN key 13

OPTICAL jack 25

OPTION key 13

Option menu 83

Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 48

Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 48

PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 115

Panorama (Sound Program menu) 94

Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 100

PARTY key 13

Party mode 81

Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 108

PC connection 37

PC content playback 68

PHONES jack 9

PHONO jack 11

Playback device connection 31

Playback device operation (remote control) 118

Please wait (error indication) 130

Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 98

Power cable connection 39

Power management 111

Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 110

PRE OUT jack 12

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 59

Pure Direct 57

PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 57

Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 102

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 146

Q factor 101

Rear panel (part names and functions) 11

Recording device connection 37

RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 116

RemID Mismatch (error indication) 130

REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 115

Remote connection 79

Remote control (part names and functions) 13

Remote control code registration

(playback device) 118

Remote control code registration (TV) 117

Remote Control Code Search 117

, 118

Remote control ID setting 115

Remote control ID setting (remote control) 115

Remote control sensor 8

Remote control sensor setting 115

Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 13

Remote ID (System, Information menu) 113

REMOTE IN jack 11

Remote Off (error indication) 130

REMOTE OUT jack 11

REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 115

Rename (input name) 88

Rename (network name) 106

Rename (scene name) 91

Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 88

Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 91

Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 64

Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 70

Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 67

Reset (remote control) 121

Reset (Scene menu) 91

Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 103

Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 93

Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 93

Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 93

Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45

Roleplaying Game (sound program) 54

Room Size (Sound Program menu) 93

Router connection 37

S VIDEO jack 25

Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 113

Save (Scene menu) 90

SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 47

Scene configuration 51

SCENE function 50

SCENE link playback 51

Scene menu 89

Sci-Fi (sound program) 54

Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 98

Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 98

Setup menu 95

Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 109

Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 64

Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 70

Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 67

Signal information 113

SILENT CINEMA 53

Simple play (iPod) 63

Single measurement (YPAO) 43

Size (YPAO measurement result) 45

SLEEP key 13

Sleep timer 13

Sleep timer (Zone2) 81

Sound (Setup menu) 101

Sound field effect 53

Sound mode selection 52

Sound program 54

, 55

Sound Program menu 92

Speaker (Setup menu) 98

Speaker cable connection 19

Speaker connection 15

SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 114

Speaker impedance 15

Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 113

Speaker impedance setting 18

, 114

Speaker indicator (front display) 10

Speaker placement 16

Spectacle (sound program) 54

Sports (sound program) 54

Standard (sound program) 54

Standby indicator (front panel) 8

Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 104

Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 105

Station preset (FM/AM radio) 59

Status (Network, Information menu) 113

STEREO (sound program subcategory) 55

Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 25

Stereo reception (FM radio) 58

STP network cable 37

STRAIGHT (sound mode) 56

Straight decode 56

Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 105

Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 113

Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 99

Subwoofer connection 19

Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 85

SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 56

Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 99

Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 99

Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 93

Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 93

Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 93

Surround decoder 56

Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 93

Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 93

Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 93

S-video cable 25

S-video connection (video device) 32

SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 85

System (Information menu) 113

System ID (System, Information menu) 113

Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 110

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 147

Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 101

The Bottom Line (sound program) 55

The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 55

Tone Control (Option menu) 84

TONE/BALANCE key 9

Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 84

Trigger function 38

Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 110

TRIGGER OUT jack 11

Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 110

Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 110

Turntable connection 34

TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 104

TV connection 26

TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 26

TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 28

TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29

TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30

TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 115

TV Format (System, Information menu) 113

TV operation (remote control) 117

TV operation key (remote control) 13

Unable to play (error indication) 130

USB jack 9

USB mass storage class device 65

USB Overloaded (error indication) 130

USB storage device connection 65

USB storage device content playback 65

User Cancel (YPAO error message) 47

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 116

Version error (error indication) 130

Video (Setup menu) 103

VIDEO AUX jack 9

Video device connection 31

VIDEO jack 25

Video Mode (Option menu) 85

Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 103

Video Out (Input menu) 88

Video pin cable 25

Video Signal (Information menu) 113

Video signal flow 134

Video signal type setting 115

Virtual CINEMA DSP 53

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7

Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 107

Volume Interlock (Input menu) 88

Volume Trim (Option menu) 85

VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7

Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 109

Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 45

Yamaha Parametric room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer 41

YPAO error message 47

YPAO MIC jack 9

YPAO microphone 41

YPAO warning message 48

Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 107

Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 108

Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 108

Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 107

Zone2 speaker connection 23

, 76

Yamaha RX-V1075 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V1075

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Download PDF

rapport

in andere talen

English: Yamaha RX-V1075 Owner's manual
italiano: Yamaha RX-V1075 Manuale del proprietario
русский: Yamaha RX-V1075 Инструкция по применению
français: Yamaha RX-V1075 Le manuel du propriétaire
español: Yamaha RX-V1075 El manual del propietario
Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V1075 Bedienungsanleitung
português: Yamaha RX-V1075 Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha RX-V1075 Brugervejledning
suomi: Yamaha RX-V1075 Omistajan opas
svenska: Yamaha RX-V1075 Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V1075 El kitabı

Yamaha RX-V1075 de handleiding

Yamaha RX-V1075 de handleiding

in andere talen

Gerelateerde artikelen